advertisement
MX710 Series
User's Guide
November 2012
Machine type(s):
7463
Model(s):
036, 037, 236, 237
www.lexmark.com
Contents
Contents
Understanding the printer control panel....................................................15
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................20
2
Contents
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................65
Paper and specialty media guide................................................................85
3
Contents
Understanding the printer menus............................................................151
Saving money and the environment.........................................................228
4
Contents
5
Contents
6
Safety information
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
•
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•
If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
•
Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•
Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•
Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ
‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
7
Safety information
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters
.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
8
Learning about the printer
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Initial setup instructions:
•
Connecting the printer
•
Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•
Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•
Loading paper
•
Configuring printer settings
•
Viewing and printing documents and photos
•
Setting up and using the printer software
•
Configuring the printer on a network
•
Caring for and maintaining the printer
•
Troubleshooting and solving problems
Instructions for:
•
Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
•
Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Find it here
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are available on the Software and Documentation CD.
For updates, visit our Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Help using the printer software
Networking Guide—Open the Software and
Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and
Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context
‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•
Help is automatically installed with the printer software.
•
The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.
9
Learning about the printer 10
What are you looking for?
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer support:
•
Documentation
•
Driver downloads
•
Live chat support
•
E
‑mail support
•
Voice support
Warranty information
Find it here
Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster:
•
Machine Type number
•
Serial number
•
Date purchased
•
Store where purchased
Warranty information varies by country or region:
•
In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
•
In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•
Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•
Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
•
Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•
Keep the printer:
–
Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–
Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–
Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–
Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•
Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
•
Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer
5
4
1
3
2
1
Right side 15 cm (6 in.)
2
Front 39.4 cm (15.5 in.)
3
Left side 15 cm (6 in.)
4
Rear
5
Top
15 cm (6 in.)
15 cm (6 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters
.
11
Learning about the printer
Basic model
1
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2
ADF tray
3
ADF bin
4
Standard bin
5
Printer control panel
6
100
‑sheet multipurpose feeder
7
Standard 550
‑sheet tray
1
4
5
6
7
2
3
12
Learning about the printer
Fully configured model
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional trays that are supported by the printer. For more information on other configurations, visit
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters
.
13
1
2
4
3
1
Optional 550
‑sheet tray
2
Optional 250
‑sheet trays
3
Caster base
4
Optional 2100
‑sheet tray
When using optional trays:
•
Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with an optional 2100
‑sheet tray.
•
The optional 2100
‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration and may be paired with only one optional 250
‑ or 550‑sheet tray.
•
You may combine three optional 250
‑ or 550‑sheet trays and install them in any order.
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•
Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
•
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
•
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
14
Use the ADF for multiple
‑page documents including twosided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single
‑page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
•
Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
•
Load up to 150 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
•
Scan sizes from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) wide to 216 x 635 mm (8.5 x 25 inches) long
•
Scan media weighs from 52 to 120 g/m
2
(14–32 lb).
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
•
Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
•
Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
•
Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.
Understanding the printer control panel 15
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
1 2 3
9
1 @ ! .
2 A B C 3 D E F
4 G H I
7
P Q R S
*
5 J K L 6 M N O
8
T U V
9
W X Y Z
0 #
C
4
5
8 7 6
Use the
1
Display
To
•
View the printer status and messages.
•
Set up and operate the printer.
2
Home button
3
Sleep button
Go to the home screen.
Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•
Touch the screen or press any hard button.
•
Open a door or cover.
•
Send a print job from the computer.
•
Perform a power
‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
•
Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
4
Keypad
5
Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
6
Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
7
Cancel button
8
Indicator light
9
USB port
Cancel all printer activity.
Check the status of the printer.
Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Understanding the printer control panel 16
Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light
Off
Blinking green
Solid green
Blinking red
Printer status
The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
The printer is on, but idle.
The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light
Off
Solid amber
Blinking amber
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow, pulsing pattern
Printer status
The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
The printer is in Sleep mode.
The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
1 2 3 4 5
6
14
13
7
8
12 11 10
9
Touch To
1
Change Language Launch the Change Language pop
‑up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer.
2
Copy
3
Fax
4
Access the Copy menus and make copies.
Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the E-mail menus and send e
‑mails.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Touch
5
FTP
6
Arrows Scroll up or down.
7
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8
Menu icon
To
Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
9
10
11
Bookmarks
USB Drive
Held Jobs
12
Status/Supplies
Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any other application.
View, select, print, scan, or e
‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
Display all current held jobs.
•
Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.
•
Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13
Tips
14
Search Held Jobs
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Search for one or more of the following items:
•
User name for held or confidential print jobs
•
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•
Profile names
•
Bookmark container or print job names
•
USB container or print job names for supported file types
Features
Feature
Menu trail line
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
Attendance message alert
Description
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default setting.
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.
Understanding the printer control panel
Feature
Warning
Description
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
18
Status message bar
Printer IP address
Example:
123.123.123.123
•
Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•
Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
•
Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
1
7 6 5
Touch
1
Arrows
To
View a list of options.
2
Copy It Print a copy.
3
Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4
Home
5
Increase
6
Decrease
7
Tips
Go to the home screen.
Select a higher value.
Select a lower value.
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
4 3 2
Understanding the printer control panel
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch
Accept
To
Save a setting.
Cancel
Reset
•
Cancel an action or a selection.
•
Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset values on the screen.
19
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•
Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active applications.
•
There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com
or inquire at your point of purchase.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•
From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•
From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•
By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:
•
Forms and Favorites
•
Multi Send
•
Scan to Network
For Windows users
1
Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
2
Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.
20
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
3
Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.
1
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2
Click Ethernet, Wi
‑Fi, or AirPort.
3
Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4
Look for IPv4 Address.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
1
Obtain the printer IP address:
•
From the printer control panel home screen
•
From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•
By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3
Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Do one or more of the following:
•
Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a
Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b
Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
c
Click Submit.
•
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Understanding the different applications
Use
Card Copy
Scan to E
To
Fax
Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send
Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
MyShortcut
Scan a document, and then send it to an e
‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on page 113.
Scan to Computer
Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 147.
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 21.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com
, and then do either of the following:
•
Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
•
Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:
–
Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.
–
Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.
2
Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3
Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•
See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•
To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
•
Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4
Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet
‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
3
Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
•
Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
•
Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used.
•
Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
•
Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
•
Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
–
When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for black and white.
–
When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
•
Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4
Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or email jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3
From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•
See the mouse
‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•
If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
4
Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:
•
The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
•
The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3
Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•
See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
•
To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
•
Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4
Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3
Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4
Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 27
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2
To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a
Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b
From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c
Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
•
To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
Notes:
–
When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–
If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved.
•
To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–
Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–
If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
3
To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a
Click Settings > Import/Export.
b
Do either of the following:
•
To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•
To import a configuration file, do the following:
1
Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2
Click Submit.
Additional printer setup
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
•
Memory card
–
DDR3 DIMM
–
Flash memory
•
Fonts
•
Firmware cards
–
Forms barcode
–
PRESCRIBE
–
IPDS
–
Printcryption
•
Lexmark
TM
Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–
Parallel 1284-B interface
–
MarkNet
TM
N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless printer server
–
MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
–
RS-232-C serial interface
28
Additional printer setup
Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat
‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1
Open the controller board access cover.
29
2
Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.
Additional printer setup
3
Remove the shield.
1
2
4
Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1
2
3
1
Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
2
Option card connector
3
Memory card connector
30
Additional printer setup
5
Reattach the shield, and then align the screws with the holes.
6
Tighten the screws on the shield.
1
2
31
Additional printer setup
7
Close the access cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1
Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2
Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may cause damage.
32
Additional printer setup
3
Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
33
4
Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place.
5
Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.
Additional printer setup
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2
Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3
Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
1 2
34
Additional printer setup
4
Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
35
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5
Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
Additional printer setup
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat
‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2
If a printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 47.
3
Unpack the ISP kit.
1
36
2
4
3
1
ISP solution
2
Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP
3
Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield
4
Plastic bracket
Additional printer setup
4
Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
a
Loosen the screw.
b
Lift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.
1 2 3
37
Additional printer setup 38
5
Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic bracket on the controller board cage until it clicks into place.
Note: Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely, and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on the cage.
6
Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.
Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the
ISP opening in the cage.
Additional printer setup
7
Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.
39
8
Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.
Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.
Additional printer setup
9
Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.
40
10
Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.
Additional printer setup
11
Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
41
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat
‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2
Unpack the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup
3
Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.
42
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a
Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
43
b
Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
c
Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color
‑coded.
Additional printer setup 44
To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage:
a
Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Additional printer setup
b
Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
45
c
Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color
‑coded.
Additional printer setup 46
Additional printer setup 47
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat
‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2
Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling out the cable.
Additional printer setup
3
Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
48
4
Remove the printer hard disk.
5
Set aside the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 49
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters
.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
•
Caster base
•
2100
‑sheet tray or spacer
•
Optional 550
‑ or 250‑sheet tray
•
Printer
For more information on installing a caster base, optional 250
‑ or 550‑sheet tray, spacer, or 2100‑sheet tray, see the setup sheet that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
The printer supports the following optional input sources:
•
250
‑ or 550‑sheet tray
•
2100
‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters
.
1
Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Additional printer setup
2
Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3
Pull out the tray completely from the base.
1
2
50
4
Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5
Insert the tray into the base.
6
Place the tray near the printer.
7
Lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer, then align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
Additional printer setup 51
8
Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Additional printer setup
2
1
Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
•
The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•
The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
52
Additional printer setup
7
6
5
53
4
3
1
2
Use the
EXT port
LINE port
3
Printer power cord socket
4
USB printer port
5
Ethernet port
6
Internal Solutions Port (ISP) or printer hard disk slot
Note: If the printer has support for wireless connection, then the wireless antenna is attached here.
7
USB port
To
Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack
(RJ
‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Connect the printer to a computer.
Connect the printer to a network.
Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.
Attach an optional wireless network adapter.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Additional printer setup
Organizing cables
Attach the Ethernet cable and power cord, and then neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.
54
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:
•
If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall the current software first.
•
Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
1
Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•
From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com
, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
Additional printer setup 55
2
Double
‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
In Macintosh
Click the CD icon on the desktop.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3
Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for use.
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
2
Depending on your device, do either of the following:
•
Press and hold the printer you want to update.
•
Right
‑click the printer you want to update.
3
From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
•
For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•
For earlier versions, select Properties.
4
Click the Configuration tab.
Additional printer setup
5
Do either of the following:
•
Click Update Now
‑ Ask Printer.
•
Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6
Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
1
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
•
System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2
Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
Networking
Notes:
•
Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with the adapter.
•
A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the printer.
•
A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•
The network gateway
•
The network mask
•
A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable.
56
Additional printer setup 57
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
For Windows users
1
Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•
From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com
, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2
Double
‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type: D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3
Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4
Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5
Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6
Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.
7
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1
Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2
Obtain the printer IP address either:
•
From the printer control panel
•
From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•
By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3
Install the printer driver on the computer.
a
Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double
‑click the installer package for the printer.
b
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Additional printer setup 58
c
Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d
From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e
Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
f
Click Close when installation is complete.
4
Add the printer.
•
For IP printing:
a
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–
System Preferences > Print & Scan
–
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b
Click +.
c
Click the IP tab.
d
Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•
For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–
Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–
This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b
Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•
Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•
Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•
SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•
Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•
Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.
•
Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–
WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–
WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.
Additional printer setup
–
802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•
Authentication type
•
Inner authentication type
•
802.1X user name and password
•
Certificates
–
No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–
If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact your system support person.
–
To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•
A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•
An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•
Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2
Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks
Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3
Follow the instructions on the printer display.
59
Additional printer setup 60
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
•
The access point (wireless router) is Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•
A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi
‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2
Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi
‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2
Copy the eight
‑digit WPS PIN.
3
Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4
Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5
Enter the eight
‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•
Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•
A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
Additional printer setup 61
3
Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and channel.
4
Click Submit.
5
Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
6
To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x] section, see if the status is Connected.
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
•
If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•
If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations.
•
If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
•
Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types, turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.
For Windows users
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
Additional printer setup 62
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
3
To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
•
Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
•
Right
‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4
Click the Ports tab.
5
Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
6
Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7
Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Add the printer.
•
For IP printing:
a
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–
System Preferences > Print & Scan
–
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b
Click +.
c
Click the IP tab.
d
Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•
For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–
Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–
This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b
Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add
Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.
Additional printer setup 63
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1
Set the parameters in the printer.
a
From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b
Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c
Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2
Install the printer driver.
a
Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer
•
From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com
, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
b
Double
‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3
Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
c
Click Install.
d
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
e
Select Advanced, and then click Continue.
f
From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
g
If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh, or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK
h
Click Continue > Finish.
3
Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a
Open Device Manager.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK
Additional printer setup 64
In Windows 7 or earlier
1
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3
Press Enter or click OK.
b
Double
‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
c
Do either of the following:
•
Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
•
Right
‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d
From the menu that appears, select Properties.
e
On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
f
Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.
g
Print a test page to verify printer installation.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:
•
Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.
•
Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2
Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Loading paper and specialty media 65
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 256 and “Storing paper” on page 90.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
Universal paper size is a user
‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.
Notes:
•
The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one
‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two
‑sided (duplex) printing.
•
The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one
‑sided and two‑sided printing.
•
When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2
Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3
Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the 250
‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1
Pull out the tray.
Notes:
•
When loading folio
‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out completely.
•
Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 66
2
Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 67
3
Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
1
2
3
Notes:
•
Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•
Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 68
4
Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
5
Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown for one
‑sided printing.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
One
‑sided printing
Two
‑sided (duplex) printing
ABC
ABC
Loading paper and specialty media
•
Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
69
•
If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
•
Make sure the paper is below the solid line, which is the maximum paper fill indicator.
70
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 71
•
When using card stock, labels, or other types of specialty media, make sure the paper is below the dashed line, which is the alternate paper fill indicator.
6
For custom
‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock the length guide.
Loading paper and specialty media
7
Insert the tray.
72
8
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the 2100
‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1
Pull out the tray completely.
2
Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading paper and specialty media
Loading A5
‑size paper
a
Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
1
LGL
OFC IO
LTR
A4
A5
OFC
LGL
OFC
FOL
IO
LTR
A4
A5
2
73
b
Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
1
2
Loading paper and specialty media
c
Remove the A5 length guide from its holder.
1 d
Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
2
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Loading A4
‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
a
Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of paper you are loading.
A4
A5
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
1
LGL
OFC IO
LTR
A4
A5
2
OFC
74
Loading paper and specialty media 75
b
If the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length guide is not attached, then proceed to step d.
c
Put the A5 length guide in its holder.
1 2
Loading paper and specialty media
d
Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
76
LGL OFC
LTR
3
Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4
Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown for one
‑sided printing.
•
Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
Loading paper and specialty media
One
‑sided printing
Two
‑sided (duplex) printing
ABC
ABC
•
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
77
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5
Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 78
LGL
OFC
LTR
A4
A5
6
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1
Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
Loading paper and specialty media
2
Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3
Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
79
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 80
4
Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•
Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•
Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•
Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
5
Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Loading paper and specialty media
•
Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•
Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
One
‑sided (simplex) printing
Two
‑sided (duplex) printing
81
•
Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
ABC
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self
‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•
Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 82
6
For custom- or Universal- size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. We recommended giving all unique paper, such as letterhead and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically link.
Linking and unlinking trays
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Paper Menu.
Loading paper and specialty media
3
Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•
To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•
To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4
Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 65.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3
Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4
Click Submit.
5
Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2
Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3
Touch Submit.
4
Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
83
Loading paper and specialty media
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3
Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user
‑defined custom names.
4
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2
Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user
‑defined custom names.
3
Touch Submit.
84
Paper and specialty media guide 85
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•
Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the printer control panel.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading it.
•
The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•
For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single
‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
•
From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card stock loaded in the tray.
•
Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•
Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed problems.
•
Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
•
From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the envelopes loaded in the tray.
•
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•
Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•
For best performance, use envelopes made from 90
‑g/m
2
(24
‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•
Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•
To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–
Have excessive curl or twist.
–
Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–
Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–
Have an interlocking design.
–
Have postage stamps attached.
–
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 86
–
Have bent corners.
–
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•
Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•
Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•
From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels loaded in the tray.
•
Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•
For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
•
Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•
Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties.
•
Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•
Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using letterhead
•
Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
•
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•
Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source
Trays
Trays
Printing
One
Two
‑sided
‑sided
Printable side
Facedown
Faceup
Paper orientation
Load the sheet with the top edge toward the front of the tray.
Load the sheet with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Multipurpose feeder
Multipurpose feeder
One
Two
‑sided
‑sided
Faceup
Facedown
Load the sheet with the top edge entering the printer first.
Load the sheet with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 87
Tips on using transparencies
•
From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the transparencies loaded in the tray.
•
Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•
Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•
Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•
When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin. You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47
‑lb) grain long paper. The 2100
‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m
2
(16–36
‑lb) grain long paper.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two
‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47
‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guide 88
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47
‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high
‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble
‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•
Always use new, undamaged paper.
•
Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•
Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•
Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•
Use grain long for 60–90
‑g/m
2
(16–24
‑lb) paper.
•
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
•
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation
‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
•
Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.
•
When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
•
Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•
Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Paper and specialty media guide 89
•
Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer)
•
Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1
Minimize paper consumption.
2
Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3
Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m
2
certified paper, lower weight paper, or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
•
Multiple part forms or documents
Paper and specialty media guide 90
For more information about Lexmark, visit
www.lexmark.com
. General sustainability-related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•
For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
•
Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Note: When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
Paper size
1 Dimensions Standard or optional 250 or 550
‑sheet
tray
‑
2100
‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner glass
A4
A5
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
2
A6
JIS B5
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
X
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
1
If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2
Paper is supported in long
‑edge orientation.
3
Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm (3 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 127 mm
(5 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 91
Paper size
1 Dimensions Standard or optional 250
‑
or 550
‑sheet
tray
2100
‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex ADF Scanner glass
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
Universal
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
105 x 148 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
9 Envelope
70 x 127 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(2.76 x 5 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X X X
1
If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2
Paper is supported in long
‑edge orientation.
3
Universal is supported in ADF only if the width is from 76 mm (3 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is from 127 mm
(5 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 92
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176
‑g/m
2
(16–47
‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type 250
‑ or
550
‑sheet tray
2100 tray
‑sheet
Multipurpose feeder
Duplex ADF
Paper
Scanner glass
Card Stock
Plain Envelope
Rough Envelope
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Paper Labels
Pharmacy Labels
X
X
Transparencies
* X X
*
Printing 93
Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
1
From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2
Depending on your printer model, touch , , or Submit.
Printing a document
1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2
Send the print job:
For Windows users a
With a document open, click File > Print.
b
Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c
Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d
Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users a
Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1
With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2
Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3
Click OK.
b
Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2
From the Print dialog and pop
‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3
Click Print.
Adjusting toner darkness
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Printing
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3
Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2
Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•
Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel.
•
You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1
Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
94
Notes:
•
A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
Printing 95
•
If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•
If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.
2
From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3
Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4
Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•
Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•
High
‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
•
USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Printing 96
Recommended flash drives
•
Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•
SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•
Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
File type
Documents:
•
•
.xps
Images:
•
.dcx
•
.gif
•
.jpeg or .jpg
•
.bmp
•
.pcx
•
.tiff or .tif
•
.png
•
.fls
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use
Max Invalid PIN
Confidential Job Expiration
Repeat Job Expiration
Verify Job Expiration
Reserve Job Expiration
To
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 1–9.
Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•
Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.
•
You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.
•
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Printing 97
2
Touch Submit.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1
With a document open, click File > Print.
2
Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3
Click Print and Hold.
4
Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four
‑digit PIN.
5
Click OK or Print.
6
From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•
For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•
For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2
From the print options or Copies & Pages pop
‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3
Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four
‑digit PIN.
4
Click OK or Print.
5
From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•
For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•
For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Printing 98
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3
Modify the settings:
•
Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
•
Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4
Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2
Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1
From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2
Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder.
Printing
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
2
Double
‑click the printer icon.
3
Select the print job you want to cancel.
4
Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
•
System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2
From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
99
Copying
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
ABC
Scanner glass
100
Use the ADF for multiple
‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same.
3
From the printer control panel, press .
Copying using the ADF
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying 101
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
Adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1
Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.
3
Touch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1
Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3
From the Content Source menu, navigate to:
Photo/Film > > Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.
4
Touch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
Copying
3
Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > > select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >
4
Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4
Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5
If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6
Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, touch Copy.
2
Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
3
Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4
Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•
The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•
You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
102
Copying 103
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4
Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy > > Copy It
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4
Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5
Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 104
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4
Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4
Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 105
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided original documents and you want two
‑sided copies.
4
Touch > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, touch Copy.
4
From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5
Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4
Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
•
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business
‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Copying 106
5
Touch .
6
Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
•
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7
Touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 107
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
4
Select one of the following:
•
Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
•
Off
5
Touch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple
‑page document onto a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•
Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•
Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Copying 108
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the same or different settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•
If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
•
If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
•
If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4
Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5
If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type of header or footer you want
Copying
4
Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5
Touch , and then press .
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and
Draft.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling
appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1
From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2
Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
109
Copying 110
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
•
Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
•
To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
•
To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
•
Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•
If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
•
If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder, and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•
When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic scaling.
•
When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal
‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
•
To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copying 111
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business
‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•
Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and how documents are bound.
•
Advanced Imaging—This changes or adjusts Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you copy the document.
•
Create Booklet—This creates a booklet. You can choose between one
‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
•
Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
•
Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•
Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Copying 112
•
Header/Footer—This inserts date or time, page number, Bates number, or custom text, and then prints them in the specified header or footer location.
•
Margin Shift—This increases or reduces the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch or to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
•
Overlay—This creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
•
Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called
N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
•
Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
•
Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
E-mailing
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
ABC
Scanner glass
113
Use the ADF for multiple
‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3
Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring e
‑mail settings
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3
Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 114
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings.
3
From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4
Type a unique name for the e
‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5
Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e
‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2
Touch Subject, then type the e
‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3
Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4
Adjust the e
‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e
‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
5
Touch .
6
Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7
Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•
The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•
You can use the shortcut when e
‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing 115
E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e
‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e
‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section.
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4
Type the e
‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
•
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
•
You can also enter an e
‑mail address using the address book.
5
Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e
‑mail using a shortcut number
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add.
4
Touch Send It.
E-mailing
Sending an e
‑mail using the address book
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4
Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add, or search the address book.
5
Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e
‑mail address > Done
4
Touch Subject, then type the e
‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5
Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
116
E-mailing 117
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e
‑mail address > Done > Send as
4
Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
•
PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.
•
Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•
TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•
JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs.
•
XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer
‑hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.
5
Touch > Send It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
•
When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•
When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job
appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e
‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
E-mailing 118
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e
‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter
‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business
‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•
PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.
•
Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•
TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•
JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
•
XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
E-mailing 119
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•
Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•
Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•
Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long
‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•
Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you e
‑mail the document.
•
Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•
Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•
Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
•
Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Faxing
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
ABC
Scanner glass
120
Use the ADF for multiple
‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
Faxing
Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
121
To connect:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Faxing 122
Tips for this setup:
•
You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
•
If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want.
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE LINE
To connect:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3
Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.
Faxing
Connected to different wall jacks
123
PHONE LINE
To connect:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
•
If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
•
Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call.
•
If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.
Faxing
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
124
02
To connect:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3
Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Tips for this setup:
•
This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.
•
If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax.
Faxing 125
•
You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.
Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:
1
Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
Faxing 126
3
To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4
To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.
Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service
To connect:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.
3
Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Faxing 127
Tips for this setup:
•
To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
•
If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
Faxing 128
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.
3
Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.
Notes:
•
To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
•
If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
•
Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
Faxing 129
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3
Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.
Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.
Part name
Lexmark adapter plug
Part number
40X8519
Faxing
Connecting the printer to a non
‑RJ‑11 wall jack
130
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ
‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3
If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device has a non
‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:
•
The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from the port of the printer.
•
In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.
Faxing 131
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.
N F N
Faxing
Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
132
N F N
PHONE
LINE
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ
‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3
If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Faxing 133
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3
Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.
a
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
b
Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3
In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4
In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5
Click Submit.
Faxing 134
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3
In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4
Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3
Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4
Click Submit.
Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e
‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User’s
Guide.
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Faxing 135
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.
5
Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1
With a document open, click File > Print.
2
Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3
Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4
Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5
If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6
Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7
If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the appropriate information.
8
Click OK.
Notes:
•
The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
•
The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it can be used.
•
If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Faxing 136
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4
Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the address book feature, contact your system support person.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > > type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4
Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue.
Faxing
4
Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
5
Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.
3
Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
•
To create a multiple
‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
•
Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4
Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5
Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2
Touch .
3
Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4
Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
137
Faxing
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4
From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5
Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4
Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Reports.
3
Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
138
Faxing 139
Blocking junk faxes
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
•
In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•
When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
•
When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page
and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1
On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2
Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.
3
Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3
From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•
Off
•
Always On
•
Manual
• Scheduled
4
If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a
Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b
From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c
From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d
From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5
Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e
‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3
From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4
From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E
‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5
In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6
Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
140
Faxing 141
Select from the following content types:
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business
‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
•
Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
•
Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
•
Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
•
Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•
Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•
Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•
Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long
‑edge or short‑edge side.
Faxing 142
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•
Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.
•
Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•
Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•
Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
•
Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Scanning 143
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 26.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple
‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3
Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.
4
Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5
Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done
2
Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
•
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
•
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
You can use the printer to send scanned documents to an FTP address in a number of ways. You can type the FTP address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send, Scan to Network, or
MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User’s Guide.
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
144
Scanning
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4
Touch > Send It.
Scanning an FTP using the address book
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4
Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.
5
Touch > Send It.
145
Scanning
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
146
Use the ADF for multiple
‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3
Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4
Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5
Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6
Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.
7
Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Scanning 147
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
b
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c
Do either of the following:
•
Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
•
From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8
View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
•
This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
•
Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1
Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c
Press Enter, or click OK.
2
Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.
3
Select your printer from the list.
Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for “Fully Qualified Domain Name” in the TCP/IP section.
4
Click Next > Close.
5
Depending on your device, do either of the following:.
•
Press and hold the printer you want to configure.
•
Right
‑click the printer you want to configure.
6
From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.
Scanning 148
7
From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:
•
Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
•
Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
•
Scan for E
‑mail—Attach a scanned document to an e‑mail.
•
Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.
8
Touch Send It.
Remote scan in progress
appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the computer screen.
Scanning to a flash drive
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•
The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3
Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4
Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5
Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Scanning 149
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter
‑ and legal‑size pages).
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•
PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
•
Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
•
TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•
JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
•
XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•
Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
•
Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•
Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long
‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•
Graphics—The original document is mostly business
‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Scanning 150
Select from the following content sources:
•
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•
Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you scan the document.
•
Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•
Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•
Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
•
Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
Understanding the printer menus
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Help
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup
Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Manage Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
Network/Ports
Active NIC
Standard Network
1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Option Card Menu
2
A list of installed DLEs
(Download Emulators) appears.
Security
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security
Settings
Confidential Print
Disk Wiping
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
1
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2
This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
151
Settings
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E
‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Understanding the printer menus
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
152
To
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•
Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•
From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
•
If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Configure MP menu
Use
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
To
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•
Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
•
Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual
‑feed print jobs.
•
First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Paper Size/Type menu
Use
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS
‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
To
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
•
default setting.
•
If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose feeder.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•
•
•
Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.
If available, a user
‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
To
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
•
default setting.
•
From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu.
The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•
Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•
From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
To
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
•
Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•
From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Type to appear as a menu.
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
Use To
Default ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom [x]
Specify the media type being loaded in the ADF.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Substitute Size menu
Use
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
To
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
•
All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.
•
Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•
Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper
appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
To
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.
Notes:
•
Normal is the factory default setting.
•
These options appear only if card stock is supported.
156
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
To
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
157
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
To
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Use
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
To
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
158
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Light Weight
Light
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
To
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•
Normal is the factory default setting.
•
The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
159
Understanding the printer menus 160
Paper Loading menu
Use
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off
Notes:
To
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Colored as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as the paper type.
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or
Cotton as the paper type.
•
Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•
Duplex sets the printer default to two
‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
To
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is supported.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•
Duplex sets the printer default to two
‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Custom Types menu
Use
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Custom Names menu
Use
Custom Name [x]
To
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user
‑defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision
TM
Professional.
Notes:
•
Paper is the factory default setting.
•
The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
•
Paper is the factory default setting.
•
The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
To
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in the printer menus.
Understanding the printer menus
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Media Type
ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Enveloope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Width
1–8.5 inches (25–216 mm)
Height
1–25 inches (25–635.0 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On
Universal Setup menu
Use
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
To
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•
Inches is the US factory default setting.
•
Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
162
To
Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:
•
ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,
5, and 6.
•
Rough/Cotton is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 1 and 2.
•
8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.
•
14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.
•
Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•
Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
163
To
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•
If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.
•
8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the width in 0.01
‑inch increments.
•
216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the width in 1
‑mm increments.
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•
If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.
•
14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the height in 0.01
‑inch increments.
•
356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the height in 1
‑mm increments.
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:
•
Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.
Reports Menu
Reports menu
Use
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
To
Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information.
Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number of printed pages.
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer, such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E
‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
To
Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
•
This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
•
This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.
Notes:
•
This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
•
This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about e
‑mail shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer.
Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk.
Notes:
•
Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•
Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and installed correctly.
Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
To
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
To
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•
Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
To
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•
On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View Card Speed
Network Address
UAA
LAA
To
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
View the network addresses.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
To
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•
“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•
A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•
If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the display, and the value is not saved.
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banner Page
Off
On
Netmask
Gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Enable RARP
On
Off
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use
Set Hostname
IP Address
To
Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
WINS Server Address
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
DNS Server Address
Backup DNS Server Address
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
To
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View or change the current WINS server address.
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View or change the current DNS server address.
View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
•
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Auto Configuration
On
Off
View Hostname
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
To
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use
Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Enable/Disable WPS Auto
‑detection
Enable
Disable
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
To
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•
Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•
Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point.
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•
Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer access a network using an access point.
•
Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Choose Network
View Signal Quality
View Security Mode
Select an available network for the printer to use.
View the quality of the wireless connection.
View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•
Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use
Activate
Yes
No
View Name
To
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Address
Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
To
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•
The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
To
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•
The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•
The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•
Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•
Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
To
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•
The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1
‑KB increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•
Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use
Advanced Status
On
Off
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Honor Init
On
Off
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
To
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
•
Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•
Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on.
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•
On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
To
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•
When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
•
When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
•
The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1
‑KB increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Data Bits
7
8
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Robust XON
On
Off
175
To
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•
On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•
Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•
DTR is the factory default setting.
•
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings.
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
•
9600 is the factory default setting.
•
138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Honor DSR
On
Off
To
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
176
SMTP Setup menu
Use
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Reply Address
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM
‑MD5
Digest
‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
To
Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e
‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer.
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
•
Disabled is the factory default setting.
•
When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan
‑to e‑mail privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
User
‑Initiated E‑mail
*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E
‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
To
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting for Device
‑Initiated E‑mail and
User
‑Initiated E‑mail.
•
Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
•
Off
•
On
Password
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
To
Create a backup password.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
•
This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Use
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
To
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults
To
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•
“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.
•
“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•
“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
•
“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•
“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120 seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Change the value of the security settings.
Notes:
•
Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
•
“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security configuration.
•
“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
To
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
•
“Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.
•
“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session is terminated immediately.
•
“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.
•
“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
To
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•
This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•
When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Notes:
•
If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
•
If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
To
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use
Wiping Mode
Auto
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
To
Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•
“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•
Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.
•
Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use
Export Log
To
Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
•
To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.
•
The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use
Delete Log
Yes
No
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Set Date/Time menu
Use
Current Date and Time
Manually Set Date and Time
Time Zone
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enable NTP
On
Off
NTP Server
To
Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Notes:
•
Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•
Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.
•
Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•
If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
To
View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View the NTP server address.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use
Enable Authentication
On
Off
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
To
Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
To
Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its factory default settings.
•
The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
•
Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.
•
Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
ADF Multi
‑feed Sensor
On
Off
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
183
To
Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. This supports the performance specifications for your printer.
•
On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.
•
For optimal printing of color
‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode to Off.
•
Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing.
Instruct the printer to run the setup wizard.
Notes:
•
Yes is the factory default setting.
•
After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
184
To
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the keyboard.
Specify the default paper measurement.
Notes:
•
U.S. is the factory default setting.
•
The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.
•
Changing this also changes the default setting for each input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
185
To
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
•
IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•
Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•
“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to display.”
•
“Default” is the factory default setting for “Message to display.”
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E
E
‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Date Format
MM
‑DD‑YYYY
DD
‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY
‑MM‑DD
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
186
To
Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper
Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•
“No” is the factory default setting for “Display.”
•
“Default” is the factory default setting for “Message to display.”
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not display
Notes:
•
“Display” is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, E
‑mail,
FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held jobs, USB Drive, and Forms and
Favorites.
•
“Do not display” is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, Email Shortcuts,
FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and Jobs by user.
Format the printer date.
Notes:
•
MM
‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
•
DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Format the printer time.
Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Screen Brightness
20–100
One Page Copy
Off
On
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright
Error Lighting
On
Off
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
187
To
Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Set the amount of light from the standard bin.
Notes:
•
Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper.
•
Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set to Paper.
Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters errors.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•
5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Provide touch
‑screen sensation feedback.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected, bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax, e
‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed.
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF.
Notes:
•
“Job level” is the factory default setting.
•
If “Job level” is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.
•
If “Page level” is selected, then rescan from the jammed page forward.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Contact Name
Location
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1
‑180
188
To
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•
Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This sounds three quick beeps.
•
Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. This means no alarm will sound.
•
Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
•
30 is the factory default setting.
•
Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm
‑up times.
•
Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room.
•
Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm
‑up time.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1–3 hr
6 hr
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
To
Set the printer to operate at a low power state.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting in all countries.
189
Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Ethernet or a phone connection.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to a Ready state.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end
‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print job.
Notes:
•
90 is the factory default setting.
•
When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.
•
Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
•
40 is the factory default setting.
•
Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
190
To
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
•
30 is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Automatically reboot the printer back into the normal operation.
Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•
On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
•
Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•
On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
191
To
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•
Sleep is the factory default setting.
•
Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.
•
If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
•
Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep mode.
•
If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the display is completely off and the Sleep button turns amber and is blinking.
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•
Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
•
Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.
•
If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off and the Sleep button turns amber.
•
Press and hold the Sleep button for three seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode.
•
Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep mode.
Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:
•
Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the user
‑defined settings.
•
Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Copy Settings menu
Copy Settings menu items and descriptions
Use
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
To
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Specify whether an original document is two
‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then to specify whether the copy should be two
‑sided or one‑sided.
Notes:
•
1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side.
•
1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the copy will have print on both sides.
•
2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the copy will have print on just one side.
•
2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the copy will also have print on both sides.
Allow copying two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2
‑up Portrait
4
‑up Portrait
2
‑up Landscape
4
‑up Landscape
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Collate
1,1,1
‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3
Specify whether or not a border is printed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Darkness
1–9
To
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
•
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
•
A4 is the international factory default setting.
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify the separator sheet source.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
193
Number of Copies
1–999
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Custom Overlay
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
To
Specify the standard bin to be used for the copy job.
Notes:
•
Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•
Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
•
Top left
•
Top middle
•
Top right
•
Bottom left
•
Bottom middle
•
Bottom right
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for the location.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
This menu appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
194
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use
Auto Center
Off
On
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
Off
On
Negative Image
Off
On
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Sharpness
1–5
Sample Copy
Off
On
Fax Settings menu
To
Automatically center the content on the page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use
Fax Name
Fax Number
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
To
Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Specify how the fax is identified.
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.
•
Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
196
To
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:
•
“Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
•
“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
•
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to Mask” setting.
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]
Fax Send Settings
Use
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
To
Configure the fax cover page.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
197
To
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
“Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•
“Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
198
To
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Darkness
1–9
Dial Prefix
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Automatic Redial
0–9
Redial frequency
1–200
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
199
To
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Mirror Image
Off
On
Negative Image
Off
On
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Sharpness
1–5
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Fax Receive Settings
Use
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Rings to Answer
1–25
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi
‑Purpose Feeder
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
To
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to
‑edge prior to faxing.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
200
To
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Enable two
‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Fax Footer
On
Off
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Fax Forwarding
Print and Forward
Forward
Forward to
Fax
E
FTP
LDSS eSF
Forward to Shortcut
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Banned Fax List
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
To
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify where the printer picks the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify a bin for received faxes.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.
Notes:
•
Fax is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
201
Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF).
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no fax ID specified.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Fax Log Settings
Use
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Speaker Settings
Use
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Speaker Volume
High
Low
To
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or fax name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specify the bin where fax logs are printed.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
202
To
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Notes:
•
“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.
•
Always On turns the speaker on.
•
Always Off turns the speaker off.
Control the volume setting.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Ringer Volume
Off
On
Answer On
Use
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
E
‑mail Settings menu
Use
E
‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
E
‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
E
‑mail Server Setup
Max E
‑mail size
0–65535 KB
E
‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
E
‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
To
Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
To
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
To
Specify e
‑mail server information.
Notes:
•
The subject field has a limitation of 255 characters.
•
The message field has a limitation of 512 characters.
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes (KB).
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
Send a message when an e-mail is bigger than the configured size limit.
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e
‑mail destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
•
E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
•
The limit is one domain.
203
Understanding the printer menus
Use
E
‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a
Content Type
Graphics
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
To
Define the e
‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Specify the format of the scanned file.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e
‑mailing.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
204
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Text/Photo Default
5–90
To
Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Notes:
•
A4 is the international factory default setting.
•
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
205
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•
Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•
5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
•
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Photo Default
5–90
E
‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Use Multi
‑Page Tiff
On
Off
206
To
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple
‑page TIFF files. For a multiplepage scan
‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
•
Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•
Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Use
Mirror Image
Off
On
Negative Image
Off
On
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Sharpness
1–5
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Understanding the printer menus 207
To
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Enable the use of the “cc:” and “bcc:” fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
To
Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
To
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
•
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
•
A4 is the international factory default setting.
208
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Photo Default
5–90
Use Multi
‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
•
Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•
Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
209
To
Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape ).
•
Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape ).
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Notes:
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple
‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan
‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Specify whether the transmission log prints.
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
Off
On
Negative Image
Off
On
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Sharpness
1–5
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Understanding the printer menus
Use
File Name
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On
Scan Preview
On
Off
210
To
Enter a base file name.
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Understanding the printer menus
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A
‑1a
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
To
Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
211
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
To
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Text or Photo Default
5–90
Photo Default
5–90
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
“Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•
“Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
212
Understanding the printer menus 213
Use
Use Multi
‑Page TIFF
On
Off
File Name
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
Off
On
Negative Image
Off
On
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Sharpness
1–5
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Print Settings
Use
Copies
1–999
To
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple
‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Type a base file name.
Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.
Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
To
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 214
Use
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Collate
1,1,1
‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
To
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
Paper Saver
Off
2
‑Up
3
‑Up
4
‑Up
6
‑Up
9
‑Up
12
‑Up
16
‑Up
Specify that multiple pages are printed on one side of a sheet.
Notes:
•
•
Off is the factory default setting.
The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Print multiple-page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•
Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•
Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Specify the orientation of a multiple
‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
•
Long Edge sets binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•
Short Edge sets binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 215
Use
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
To
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3.” If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•
Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•
Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Job Waiting
On
Off
To
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•
PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
•
Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Resource Save
On
Off
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
216
To
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•
Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non
‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
•
Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non
‑printable area defined by the Normal setting. Whole
Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•
RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.
•
Storing downloads in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.
•
This menu appears only when a formatted, working flash drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
•
On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38]
appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Understanding the printer menus
Finishing menu
Use
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Copies
1–999
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Collate
1,1,1
‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
217
To
Specify whether two
‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•
“1 sided” is the factory default setting.
•
You can set two
‑sided printing from the software program.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop
‑up menus.
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•
Long Edge is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•
Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Notes:
•
“1,1,1
‑ 2,2,2” is the factory default setting.
•
“1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3” stacks the print job in sequence.
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting.
•
Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “1,2,3
‑ 1,2,3.” If Collate is set to ”1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•
Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•
Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
To
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:
•
Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•
From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Print multiple pages on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.
218
Paper Saver
Off
2
‑Up
3
‑Up
4
‑Up
6
‑Up
9
‑Up
12
‑Up
16
‑Up
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Quality menu
Use
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the positioning of multiple pages when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
•
Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•
Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Specify the orientation of a multiple
‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
To
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 219
Use
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated
Toner Darkness
1–10
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Contrast
0–5
To
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
•
8 is the factory default setting.
•
Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop
‑up menus.
•
To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer hard disk is not read/write
‑ or write‑protected.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Job Accounting Utilities
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Understanding the printer menus 220
Use
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E
‑mail Current Log
E
‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Disk Near Full Action
None
E
‑mail Current Log
E
‑mail & Delete Current Log
E
‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Disk Full Action
None
E
‑mail & Delete Current Log
E
‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
URL to Post Logs
E
‑mail Address to Send Logs
Log File Prefix
To
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting.
•
The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered.
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
Specify the e
‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log file prefix.
Understanding the printer menus
Utilities menu
Use
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Format Flash
Yes
No
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Activate Hex Trace
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
221
To
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•
Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.
•
Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory.
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.
Notes:
•
Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•
No cancels the format request.
•
Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer.
•
The flash memory option card must not be read/write
‑ or write‑protected.
•
This menu item appears only when a non
‑defective flash memory card is installed.
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobs.
Notes:
•
Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•
Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch
‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•
When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•
To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
XPS menu
Use
Print Error Pages
Off
On
PDF menu
Use
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Annotations
Do Not Print
PostScript menu
Use
Print PS Error
On
Off
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
To
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
To
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
To
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•
Resident is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
•
Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write
‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•
Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
222
Understanding the printer menus
PCL Emul menu
Use
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Font Name
Courier 10
Symbol Set
10U PC
‑8
12U PC
‑850
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
223
To
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•
“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•
“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
•
The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write
‑, write
‑, or password‑protected.
•
“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•
“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•
10U PC
‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international factory default setting.
•
A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•
12 is the factory default setting.
•
Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 0.014 inch.
•
Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25
‑point increments.
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•
10 is the factory default setting.
•
Pitch refers to the number of fixed
‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01
‑cpi increments.
•
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed.
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
•
Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.
•
Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Understanding the printer menus
Use
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
224
To
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•
60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
•
The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
Set the printer to print on A4
‑size paper.
Notes:
•
“198 mm” is the factory default setting.
•
The 203
‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10
‑pitch characters.
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
•
“Off” is the factory default setting.
•
“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•
“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
HTML menu
Use
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
To
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
To
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.
225
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Image menu
Use
Auto Fit
On
Off
Invert
On
Off
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Understanding the printer menus
Use
Font Size
1–255 pt
Scale
1–400%
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Margin Size
8–255 mm
To
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•
12 pt is the factory default setting.
•
Font size can be increased in 1
‑point increments.
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•
100% is the factory default setting.
•
Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•
19 mm is the factory default setting.
•
Margin size can be increased in 1
‑mm increments.
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
226
To
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•
Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•
When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding the printer menus 227
Use
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
To
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Menu item
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E
‑mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Description
Prints all the guides
Provides information about making copies and changing settings
Provides information about sending e
‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Provides help in locating additional information
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Saving money and the environment 228
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•
The Notices chapter
•
The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com/environment
•
The Lexmark recycling program at
www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
To quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, use Eco-Mode.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2
‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple
‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N
‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•
Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it.
•
Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Saving money and the environment 229
Saving energy
Using Eco
‑Mode
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > General Settings > Eco
‑Mode > select a setting
Use
Off
Energy
To
Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco
‑Mode. Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•
Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.
•
The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
•
Enable the automatic two
‑sided (duplex) feature.
•
Turn off print log features.
3
Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Saving money and the environment 230
Use
On
Off
To
Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•
Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
•
Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.
Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.
3
Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Select from 1 to 120 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3
In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
4
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2
In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode, and then touch Submit.
Saving money and the environment 231
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra
‑low‑power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and all other systems and devices are turned off safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3
From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” drop
‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2
From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Select from 20 to 100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > General Settings.
3
In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4
Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 232
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2
In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display, and then touch Submit.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:
•
The Notices chapter
•
The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com/environment
•
The Lexmark recycling program at
www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1
Go to
www.lexmark.com/recycle
.
2
Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
Saving money and the environment 233
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1
Go to
www.lexmark.com/recycle
.
2
From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Securing the printer 234
Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory
Volatile memory
Non-volatile memory
Hard disk memory
Description
Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•
The printer is being decommissioned.
•
The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•
The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
•
The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•
The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•
The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high
‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
•
Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•
Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•
Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply turn off the printer.
Securing the printer 235
Erasing non
‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these steps:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3
Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer memory.
4
Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power
‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3
Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•
Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•
Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22
‑M standard for securely erasing data from a printer hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4
Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•
A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task.
•
Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
5
Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer undergoes a power
‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 236
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non
‑defective printer hard disk is installed.
3
From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•
Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•
Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
4
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3
Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4
Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•
Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•
Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
•
A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5
Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power
‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 237
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page
.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com
, and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT.
2
From the “Search by Product Category” section, navigate to Software and Solutions > Other Applications.
3
Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide.
Maintaining the printer 238
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies, may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.
1
Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
2
Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3
Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4
Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer.
5
Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Maintaining the printer
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Open the scanner cover.
239
3
Remove the white underside of the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer
4
Open the bottom ADF door.
1
2
5
Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
6
Close the bottom ADF door.
7
Place the white underside of the scanner cover on the scanner glass, and then close the scanner cover.
240
Maintaining the printer
8
Wipe the areas shown, and then let them dry.
4 1
3 2
1
White underside of the scanner cover
2
Scanner glass
3
ADF glass
4
White underside of the ADF cover
9
Close the scanner cover.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Device Status > More Details.
241
Maintaining the printer 242
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com
or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter
‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
•
The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
•
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Item
United States and Canada
Toner Cartridge
High Yield Toner Cartridge
Return Program cartridge
621
621H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge
621X
*
European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), and Switzerland
Toner Cartridge
High Yield Toner Cartridge
622
622H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge
622X
*
*
This toner cartridge is supported only in the MX711 printer model.
For more information on countries located in each region, visit
www.lexmark.com/regions
.
Maintaining the printer 243
Item
Asia Pacific region (includes Australia and New Zealand)
Toner Cartridge
High Yield Toner Cartridge
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge
Return Program cartridge
623
623H
623X
*
Latin America (includes Puerto Rico and Mexico)
Toner Cartridge
High Yield Toner Cartridge
624
624H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge
624X
*
Africa, Middle East, Central Eastern Europe (non
‑EU), and Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)
Toner Cartridge 625
High Yield Toner Cartridge
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge
625H
625X
*
*
This toner cartridge is supported only in the MX711 printer model.
For more information on countries located in each region, visit
www.lexmark.com/regions
.
Regular cartridge Item
Worldwide
High Yield Toner Cartridge
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge
1
This toner cartridge is supported only in the MX710 printer model.
2
This toner cartridge is supported only in the MX711 printer model.
620HA
620XA
1
2
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name
Imaging unit
Lexmark Return Program
520Z
Regular
520ZA
Maintaining the printer 244
Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, view the label on the fuser. Do either of the following:
•
Remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the front of the fuser.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
•
Pull down the printer rear door. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the rear of the fuser.
Notes:
•
Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
•
The separator roller, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
•
For more information on replacing the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that came with each part.
Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kit type
Type
MX710 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 00
MX710 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 01
MX710 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 02
MX710 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 03
MX710 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 04
Part number
40X8420
40X8421
40X8422
40X8423
40X8424
Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kit type
Type
MX710 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 05
MX710 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 06
MX710 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 07
MX710 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 08
MX710 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 09
Part number
40X8425
40X8426
40X8427
40X8428
40X8429
Lexmark roller kit
Part number
40X7706 MX710 Series roller kit
Lexmark ADF maintenance kit
MX710 Series ADF maintenance kit
Part number
40X8431
Maintaining the printer 245
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•
Direct sunlight
•
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•
High humidity above 80%
•
Salty air
•
Corrosive gases
•
Heavy dust
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1
Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
Maintaining the printer
2
Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.
246
3
Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute the toner.
4
Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer
5
Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
Replacing the imaging unit
1
Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
1
2
2
1
247
Maintaining the printer
2
Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.
248
3
Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
Maintaining the printer
4
Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
249
5
Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
6
Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer 250
7
Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
8
Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 251
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
•
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•
If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
•
Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•
Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•
Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Maintaining the printer 252
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•
Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•
Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options.
•
Keep the printer in an upright position.
•
Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Managing the printer 253
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Checking the virtual display
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e
‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e
‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings.
3
From the Other Settings menu, click E
‑mail Alert Setup.
4
Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e
‑mail addresses.
5
Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e
‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, network, and supplies.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Managing the printer 254
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their end
‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•
Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•
All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end
‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
•
The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions.
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2
Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3
From the drop
‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification
Off
E
‑mail Only
Warning
Description
The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
The printer generates an e
‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
The printer displays the warning message and generates an e
‑mail about the status of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop
1
Non Continuable Stop
1,2
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs to press a button to continue printing.
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to continue printing.
1
The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2
The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4
Click Submit.
Managing the printer 255
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 64.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non
‑volatile memory” on page 235.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Clearing jams 256
Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•
Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•
Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•
Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•
Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
Clearing jams 257
•
Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes.
•
Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
•
Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•
Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•
Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Notes:
•
When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
•
When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting reprints jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available.
Clearing jams 258
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
2
Area
1
2
3
4
Area name
Upper rear door
Upper door and rear duplex area
Trays
Duplex area
Printer control panel message
[x]
‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]
What to do
Open the rear door of the printer, and then remove the jammed paper.
[x]
‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231
‑234]
Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex area, and then remove the jammed paper.
[x]
‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
[x]
‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239]
Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.
5
Multipurpose feeder [x]
‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]
6
Inside the printer [x]
‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]
Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the jammed paper.
Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder, then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit, and then remove the jammed paper.
7
Standard bin [x]
‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]
Remove all paper from the standard bin, and then remove the jammed paper.
8
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
[x]page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
Clearing jams
[x]
‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1
Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
259
2
Lift the green handle, and then pull out the toner cartridge from the printer.
1
2
3
Place the toner cartridge aside.
Clearing jams
4
Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
260
1
2
5
Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
6
Pull the jammed paper gently to the right, and then remove it from the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
1 2
Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with toner, which can stain garments and skin.
Clearing jams
7
Install the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide.
8
Insert the toner cartridge into the printer, and then push the green handle back into place.
Notes:
•
Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer.
•
Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
261
Clearing jams
9
Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
10
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]
‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1
Pull down the rear door.
262
2
Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams
3
Close the rear door.
4
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]
‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1
Pull down the rear door.
2
Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
263
Clearing jams
3
Close the rear door.
4
Push the back of the standard tray.
5
Press down the rear duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
264
Clearing jams
2
1
6
Insert the standard tray.
7
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]
‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]
1
Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
265
Clearing jams 266
2
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]
‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239]
1
Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out.
2
3
1
2
Push down the front duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper to the right and out of the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams
1
2
3
Insert the tray.
4
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]
‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
1
Check which tray is indicated on the printer display, and then pull the tray.
267
2
Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams
3
Insert the tray.
4
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]
‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]
1
From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
268
Clearing jams 269
2
Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
3
Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
4
Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.
5
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams
[x]
‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1
Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.
2
Open the ADF cover.
270
3
Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4
Close the ADF cover.
5
Open the scanner cover.
6
If the jam is in the bottom ADF door or ADF exit bin, then open the bottom ADF door, and then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 271
1
2
7
Close the bottom ADF door.
8
Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper guide.
9
From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 272
Troubleshooting
Understanding printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•
Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•
Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•
Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•
Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•
Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•
Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 273
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•
Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•
Cancel the print job.
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
•
Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Remove the indicated tray.
4
Reattach the tray.
5
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6
Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Remove the tray.
4
Contact customer support.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.
Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and covers.
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.
•
Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Troubleshooting 274
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•
Cancel current print job.
•
Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
•
The printer firmware has been updated.
•
The tray for the print job has been removed.
•
The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Replace the defective flash memory card.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•
Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•
Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting
•
Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•
Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
275
Troubleshooting 276
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Remove the indicated tray.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the indicated tray.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•
Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
•
Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
•
Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
Troubleshooting
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
•
Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
•
Cancel the print job.
•
Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.
Install duplex
Try one or more of the following:
•
Install the duplex unit:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Install the duplex unit.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5
Restart the printer.
•
Cancel the current job.
•
Reset the active bin.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Install the specified tray:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Install the specified tray.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
•
Cancel the print job.
•
Reset the active bin.
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
•
Install additional printer memory.
277
Troubleshooting 278
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
•
Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•
To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•
To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 279
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
•
To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•
To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 280
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com
or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com
or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com
or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•
Install additional printer memory.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after the printer is restarted.
Troubleshooting 281
Memory full, cannot send faxes
1
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2
Try one or more of the following:
•
Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
•
Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•
Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Non
‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non
‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, touch and hold and the # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com
.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
Troubleshooting
•
Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com
or contact customer support.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•
If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•
If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the imaging unit.
282
Troubleshooting 283
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•
Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com
.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Printer and toner cartridge regions
5
9
3
4
1
2
Region number
0
Region
Global
United States, Canada
European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
Latin America
Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
Invalid
Troubleshooting 284
Notes:
•
The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
•
The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com
.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•
Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•
Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•
Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
Contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com
or your service representative, and then report the message.
The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Replace missing fuser [80.xx]
1
Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 285
Replace roller kit [81.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Replace the roller kit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
•
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Replace separator pad
Try one or more of the following:
•
Replace the separator pad. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Ignore to clear the message.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com
.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com
.
Replace wiper
Try one or more of the following:
•
Replace the fuser wiper in the printer.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
•
From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Troubleshooting 286
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
•
Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
Contact customer support, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Serial option [x] error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•
Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
•
Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and computer.
•
Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
•
Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
•
From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
Troubleshooting
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•
Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
•
Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
•
Install the missing supply to complete the job.
•
Cancel the current job.
Too many disks installed [58]
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
Too many flash options installed [58]
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Remove the extra flash memory.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
287
Troubleshooting 288
Too many trays attached [58]
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Remove the extra trays.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
Replace with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•
Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.
Unsupported camera mode, unplug camera and change mode
The camera mode does not support PictBridge.
Unplug the camera, change the mode and plug the camera back into the printer.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3
Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:
•
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Troubleshooting 289
•
Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
•
“Basic printer problems” on page 289
•
“Hardware and internal option problems” on page 291
•
“Paper feed problems” on page 294
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Turn on the printer.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Press the Sleep button to wake the printer from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other electrical equipment, and then turn on the printer. If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 290
Action Yes
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports.
Go to step 6.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.
No
Make sure to match the following:
•
The USB symbol on the cable with the
USB symbol on the printer
•
The appropriate
Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port
Go to step 7.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 8.
Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material.
Go to step 10.
Turn off the printer, remove all packing materials, then reinstall the hardware options, and then turn on the printer.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed?
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Go to step 11.
Use correct printer driver settings.
Are the port settings correct?
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Go to step 12.
Install the correct printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
The problem is solved. Contact
Is the printer working?
Troubleshooting 291
Printer display is blank
Action
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
The problem is solved. Turn off the printer, and then contact
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
a
Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
b
Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board.
c
Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Go to step 3.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Go to step 4.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Connect the internal option to the controller board.
Reinstall the internal option.
Troubleshooting 292
Action Yes No
Step 4 a
Check if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 55.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Contact
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action
Step 1
Reinstall the internal print server.
a
Remove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 36.
b
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print server is listed in the Installed Features list.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Check if the internal print server is supported by the printer.
Note: An internal print server from another printer may not work with this printer.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected to the internal print server.
The problem is solved. Contact
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
a
Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
b
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
No
Check if you have a supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer.
Troubleshooting 293
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
a
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP.
b
Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color
‑coded.
The problem is solved. Contact
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•
Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•
Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•
If you are printing on custom
‑size paper, then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•
Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b
Check if the tray closes properly.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Is the tray working?
Step 2 a
Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Is the tray working?
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the tray. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the tray.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Troubleshooting 294
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
The problem is solved. Contact
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
a
Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 36.
b
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Check if you have a supported USB or parallel interface card.
Note: A USB or parallel interface card from another printer may not work on this printer.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card.
The problem is solved. Contact
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action
Turn on Jam Recovery.
a
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
b
From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto
.
c
Touch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Troubleshooting 295
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•
Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•
Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•
Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
•
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•
Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b
Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint automatically.
Go to step 2.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 2 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 3 a
Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 256.
b
Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Contact
.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a
Remove any jammed paper.
b
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Contact
.
Does the paper jam message remain?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
No
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 296
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.
Action Yes
Step 1
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your print job is listed.
Go to step 2.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
No
Select one of the Print and Hold options, and then resend the print job. For more information, see
“Printing confidential and other held jobs” on page 97.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•
Delete the print job, and then send it again.
•
For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
For Windows users a
Open the Print Properties folder.
b
From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents” check box.
c
Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?
The problem is solved. Add additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 297
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes a
Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the flaps.
b
Resend the print job.
Contact
.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
No
The problem is solved.
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Insert the flash drive into the front USB port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Wait until the printer is ready, then view the held jobs list, and then print the documents.
Go to step 3.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Step 3 a
Check for an error message on the display.
b
Clear the message.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 95.
Go to step 5.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Contact
.
Does the error message still appear?
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 298
Incorrect characters print
Action
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Yes
Deactivate Hex Trace mode.
No
Go to step 2.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Step 2 a
From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b
Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact
.
The problem is solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action
Step 1 a
Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2 a
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4 a
Check if the trays are not linked.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Contact
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Troubleshooting
Large jobs do not collate
Action
Step 1 a
From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b
Resend the print job.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 2 a
From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
The problem is solved. Contact
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Multiple
‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b
Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Do the files print?
Step 2 a
Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
b
Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Contact
299
Troubleshooting
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Do the jobs print?
Step 2 a
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the printer display.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Do the jobs print?
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
Step 4 a
Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Do the jobs print?
Step 5 a
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Do the jobs print?
Step 6 a
Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 54.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
b
Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Contact
300
Troubleshooting
Print job takes longer than expected
Action
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b
Select Eco
‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Did the job print?
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Did the job print?
Step 3 a
Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
b
Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 4 a
Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Did the job print?
Step 5 a
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Did the job print?
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Contact
301
Troubleshooting 302
Printing slows down
Notes:
•
When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•
The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4
‑size paper.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Does the print speed increase?
Step 2 a
Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Contact
Does the print speed increase?
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•
The trays can detect paper length.
•
The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type.
•
Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
•
Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Do the trays link correctly?
Troubleshooting 303
Action Yes No
Step 2 a
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Contact
Do the trays link correctly?
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action
Increase the printing timeout.
a
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b
Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c
Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Check the original file for manual page breaks.
Troubleshooting
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
304
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer.
1
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Go to step 2.
> Reports > Print Fonts
2
Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b
Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use. For more information, contact your system support person.
c
Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
Step 2 a
Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your system support person.
b
Resend the print job.
Contact
.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 305
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Is the page or image clipped?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
No
The problem is solved.
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
Is the page or image clipped?
Step 4 a
Reinstall the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge.
2
Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3
Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Contact
.
Is the page or image clipped?
Do one or more of the following:
•
Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4
‑size paper.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Do compressed images still appear?
Step 2 a
Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Contact
Do compressed images still appear?
Gray background on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1 a
From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b
Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
306
Troubleshooting
Action
Step 2
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
a
Remove the toner cartridge.
b
Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
c
Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
d
Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
The problem is solved. Contact
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
307
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1 a
Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 2 a
Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 308
Action
Step 3 a
Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2
Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3
Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact
.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Incorrect margins on prints
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
A B C D
A B C D
A B C D
Action Yes No
Step 1 a
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
b
Resend the print job.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Are the margins correct?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Do one or more of the following:
•
Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.
Troubleshooting 309
Action
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Paper curl
Action Yes
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Go to step 2.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 4 a
Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 5.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 5 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
Contact
.
Is the paper still curled?
No
Adjust the width and length guides.
Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Printer is printing blank pages
310
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2
Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3
Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 2 a
Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2
Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3
Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact
.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Printer is printing solid black pages
311
Action
Step 1 a
Reinstall the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2
Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact
.
Print irregularities
Leading edge
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Do print irregularities still appear?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
No
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 312
Action
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Yes
Go to step 3.
No
Specify the paper size and type from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in the tray?
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
The problem is solved.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact
at
http://support.lexmar
k.com
or your service representative.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Print is too dark
313
Action Yes
Step 1 a
From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 2 a
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
No
The problem is solved.
Do one or more of the following:
•
Specify the paper type, texture, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type, texture and weight specified in the tray settings.
The problem is solved.
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 314
Action
Step 5 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
Go to step 6.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact
.
Print is too light
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Action Yes
Step 1 a
From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner darkness.
Go to step 2.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b
Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
Is the print still too light?
No
The problem is solved.
Change the paper type, texture, and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 315
Action
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.
Go to step 6.
No
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Is the print still too light?
Step 6 a
Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2
Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3
Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 7.
Is the print still too light?
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact
.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Is the print still too light?
Troubleshooting
Repeating defects appear on prints
316
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Replace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal to any of the following:
•
47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
•
96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
•
28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Step 2 a
Replace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either of the following:
Contact
.
•
94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
•
95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
b
Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 317
Shadow images appear on prints
Leading edge
A B C D
A B C D
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4.
Contact
.
No
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Skewed print
318
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Is the print still skewed?
Step 2 a
Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
Contact
.
Is the print still skewed?
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?
No
The problem is solved.
Change the paper type and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Troubleshooting 319
Action
Step 3 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 4 a
Reinstall the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2
Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 5.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact
.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action Yes
Step 1 a
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
No
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 320
Action Yes
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
No
Do one or more of the following:
•
Specify the paper texture, type, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•
Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture, type, and weight specified in the tray settings.
The problem is solved.
Step 3 a
Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 4 a
Reinstall the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2
Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 5.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
The problem is solved.
Contact
at
http://support.lexmar
k.com
or your service representative.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
321
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Step 1
Reinstall the imaging unit.
a
Remove, and then install the imaging unit.
b
Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
The problem is solved.
Contact
at
http://support.lexmar
k.com
or your service representative.
The problem is solved.
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
ABC
DEF
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and weight.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper loaded in the tray?
Step 2
Check if you are printing on paper that is heavy or has texture or rough finishes.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper texture.
Contact
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Troubleshooting 322
Toner specks appear on prints
Action
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Yes
Contact
.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Step 2 a
Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
b
Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact
.
Uneven print density
No
The problem is solved.
No
Set the paper type to
Transparency.
The problem is solved.
Action
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Yes
Contact
.
No
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
323
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1 a
Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 2 a
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a
Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 4 a
Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1
Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2
Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3
Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b
Resend the print job.
Go to step 5.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact
.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 324
Solving copy problems
•
“Copier does not respond” on page 324
•
“Partial document or photo copies” on page 324
•
“Poor copy quality” on page 325
•
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 326
Copier does not respond
Action
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Yes No
Clear the error or status message.
Go to step 2.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Go to step 3.
Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?
Step 3
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.
The problem is solved. Contact
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Go to step 2.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Go to step 3.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
No
Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray, or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting.
Troubleshooting 325
Action
Step 3 a
Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b
Resend the print job.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Do copies print properly?
Poor copy quality
Action
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Yes No
Clear the error or status message.
Go to step 2.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Go to step 3.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Go to step 4.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a
From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco
‑Mode settings.
b
From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
c
If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Go to step 5.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Go to step 6.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Go to step 7.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?
Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher
‑quality output.
See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 239.
See “Print quality problems” on page 304.
Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to match the document being scanned.
Troubleshooting 326
Action Yes
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
a
From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
b
Resend the copy job.
Go to step 8.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a
From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b
Adjust the settings:
•
Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
•
Contrast—Increase the current setting.
c
Resend the copy job.
Go to step 9.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Step 9
Check for washed
‑out or overexposed output.
a
From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b
Adjust the settings of the following:
•
Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
•
Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
c
Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed
‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact
.
No
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer.
a
Lift the scanner unit.
b
Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c
Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Troubleshooting 327
Solving fax problems
•
“Caller ID is not shown” on page 327
•
“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 327
•
“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 330
•
“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 330
•
“Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 331
•
“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 332
Caller ID is not shown
Action
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
•
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
•
The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns.
•
Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?
Yes No
Clear the error or status message.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Troubleshooting 328
Action Yes
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the display.
Go to step 4.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure:
•
Telephone
•
Handset
•
Answering machine
Go to step 5.
No
Turn on the printer, and then wait until
Ready
appears on the display.
Securely connect the cables.
Are the cable connections secure?
Step 5 a
Check the telephone wall jack.
1
Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2
Listen for a dial tone.
3
If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack.
4
If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack.
5
If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b
Try sending or receiving a fax.
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
•
If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an Rinterface port, contact your ISDN provider.
•
If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.
•
If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Go to step 7.
Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector?
Troubleshooting 329
Action
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Yes
Go to step 8.
No
•
Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly.
•
If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.
•
If you are using the
On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 9 a
Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b
Try sending or receiving a fax.
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 10 a
Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b
Try sending or receiving a fax.
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a
Dial the fax number.
b
Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Contact
Troubleshooting
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Can you send faxes?
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Can you send faxes?
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
•
Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number that you want to dial.
•
Dial the telephone number manually.
The problem is solved. Contact
Can you send faxes?
Can send but not receive faxes
Action
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
330
Troubleshooting
Action
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
a
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
b
Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c
In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d
Click Submit.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Can you receive faxes?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
The problem is solved. Contact
Can you receive faxes?
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
•
Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
•
The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e
‑mail.
Action a
From the home screen, navigate to:
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit b
Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.
c
Select a language, and then touch .
d
Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
e
Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
f
Select Fax and E
‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e
‑mail functions set up?
331
Troubleshooting
Received fax has poor print quality
Action
Step 1
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a
Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b
Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c
Resend the fax.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•
View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
•
Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
b
Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c
In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
•
2400
•
4800
•
9600
•
14400
•
33600
d
Click Submit, and then resend the fax.
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge, and then resend the fax.
The problem is solved. Contact
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Solving scanner problems
•
“Cannot scan from a computer” on page 333
•
“Partial document or photo scans” on page 333
•
“Poor scanned image quality” on page 334
332
Troubleshooting 333
•
“Scan job was not successful” on page 335
•
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 335
•
“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 335
•
“The scanner does not respond” on page 336
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job.
Go to step 3.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
Clear the error message.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Contact
.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure?
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Contact
.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
No
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Tighten the cable connections.
No
Load the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Troubleshooting
Poor scanned image quality
Action
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Yes
Clear the error message.
Go to step 3.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint
‑free cloth dampened with water.
Go to step 4.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Go to step 5.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
•
From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco
‑Mode settings.
•
From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
•
When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Go to step 6.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Go to step 7.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher
‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher
‑quality output?
Problem solved.
No
Go to step 2.
334
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher
‑quality output.
See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 239.
Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
See “Print quality problems” on page 304.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to match the document being scanned.
Contact
Troubleshooting 335
Scan job was not successful
Action
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Connect the cables properly.
Are the cables securely connected?
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Change the file name.
Go to step 3.
Is the file name already in use?
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user.
Close the file you are scanning.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Contact
.
Go to step 4.
Select the Append time
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings?
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a
Lift the scanner unit.
b
Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c
Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
No
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 336
Action
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Yes
Contact
.
No
The problem is solved.
The scanner does not respond
Action
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Turn on the printer.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Go to step 3.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Go to step 4.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.
Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Go to step 5.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Go to step 6.
Unplug the other electrical equipment and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting
Action
Step 7
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
Yes No
The problem is solved. Contact
Are the printer and scanner working?
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
Action
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
a
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•
View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b
Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
c
From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d
From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
Yes No
Contact
The problem is solved. Contact
337
Troubleshooting 338
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes
Step 1
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:
•
From the printer home screen
•
From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•
By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Go to step 2.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Go to step 3.
No
Type the correct printer IP address in the address field of your
Web browser.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type
“https://” instead of
“http://” before the printer IP address to access the Embedded
Web Server.
Turn on the printer.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 3
Check if the network connection is working.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Go to step 4.
Is the network connection working?
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Contact your system support person.
Tighten the cable connection.
Contact your system support person.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?
Step 6
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address in the address field.
The problem is solved. Contact
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the printer control panel light sequence, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
Troubleshooting 339
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com
, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you solve common problems.
You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat
You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product.
Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit the
Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com
.
Notices 340
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX710, MX711
Machine type:
7463
Model(s):
036, 037, 236, 237
Edition notice
November 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit
http://support.lexmark.com
.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit
www.lexmark.com
.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 341
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus
Antique Olive
Apple-Chancery
Arial
CG Times
The Monotype Corporation plc
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple Computer, Inc.
The Monotype Corporation plc
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Apple Computer, Inc.
Chicago
Clarendon
Eurostile
Geneva
GillSans
Helvetica
Hoefler
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Nebiolo
Apple Computer, Inc.
The Monotype Corporation plc
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa
ITC Zapf Chancery
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
Joanna
Marigold
Monaco
New York
The Monotype Corporation plc
Arthur Baker
Apple Computer, Inc.
Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford
Palatino
Stempel Garamond
Taffy
Times New Roman
Arthur Baker
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Agfa Corporation
The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 342
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 58 dBA
Scanning
Copying
Ready
57 dBA
58 dBA
33 dBA
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com
for current values.
Notices
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
343
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com
for your local sales office phone number.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Notices 344
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature
Shipping temperature
Storage temperature and relative humidity
15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
-40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787-800 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危
险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會
產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Notices 345
Mode
Printing
Copy
Scan
Description
The product is generating hard
‑copy output from electronic inputs.
The product is generating hard
‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents.
The product is scanning hard
‑copy documents.
Ready The product is waiting for a print job.
Sleep Mode The product is in a high
‑level energy‑saving mode.
Hibernate The product is in a low
‑level energy‑saving mode.
Off
Power consumption (Watts)
825 (MX710); 925 (MX711)
860 (MX710); 960 (MX711)
130
110 (Ready 1); 55 (Ready 2)
14 (MX710); 15 (MX711)
0.7
The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned off.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com
for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra
‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•
Using the Hibernate Timeout
•
Using the Schedule Power modes
•
Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions Disabled
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Notices 346
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.
Notices 347
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at
www.lexmark.com
or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notices 348
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre, entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Notices 349
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
•
There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
•
The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
•
The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Notices
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
350
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :
Notices 351
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Notices 352
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT
EL
LI
RO
BE
ES
LT
SE
BG
FI
LU
SI
CH
FR
LV
SK
CY
HR
MT
TR
CZ
HU
NL
UK
DE
IE
NO
DK
IS
PL
EE
IT
PT
Česky
Dansk
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Eesti
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Notices 353
Norsk
Polski
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
Notices 354
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Notices 355
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service.
Notices 356
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
Index 357
Index
Numerics
2100
‑sheet tray
250
‑sheet tray
550
‑sheet tray
Symbols
[x]
‑ page jam, open upper rear
[x]
‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[x]
‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201] 259
[x]
‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 270
[x]
‑page jam, open tray [x].
[x]
‑page jam, open upper and lower
[x]
‑page jam, remove standard bin
[x]
‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
A
accessing the Embedded Web
ADF
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 231 printer display 231
adjusting display brightness 231
administrator settings
advanced options
e
answering machine
applications
B
buttons, printer control panel 15
buttons, touch screen
C
cables
canceling
canceling a print job
from a computer 98 from the printer control panel 98
cannot open Embedded Web
Card Copy
card stock
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load
checking an unresponsive
checking status of parts and
checking the status of parts and
checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web
checking virtual display using the Embedded Web
cleaning
Close door or insert cartridge 273
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
collate
Complex page, some data may not
compressed images appear on
confidential data
confidential jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 97 printing from Windows 97
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 274
configuration information
Index 358 configuring supply notifications, imaging
supply notifications, maintenance
supply notifications, toner
configuring e
configuring supply notifications 254
connecting printer to distinctive
connecting to a wireless network using PIN (Personal Identification
using Push Button Configuration
using the Embedded Web
using wireless setup wizard 59
conservation settings
Eco
contacting customer support 338
content e
content source e
content type e
control panel, printer 15 indicator light 15
controller board
copies
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 109 using the scanner glass 109
copy options
copy quality
copy screen
content source 111 content type 111
copy troubleshooting
partial document or photo
poor scanned image quality 334
scanner unit does not
copying
creating shortcuts using the
inserting a header or footer 108
multiple pages on one sheet 107
on both sides of the paper
on transparencies 101 photos 101
placing separator sheets between
selecting a tray 103 to a different size 103
copying different paper sizes 103
copying multiple pages on one
copying on both sides of the paper
creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web
creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web
custom paper type
custom paper type name
Custom Type [x]
customer support
D
darkness
e
date and time, fax
setting 134 daylight saving time, setting 134
Defective flash detected [51] 274
delayed send
device and network settings information
different paper sizes, copying 103
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
digital telephone service
directory list
Disk full, scan job canceled 274
Disk must be formatted for use in
display troubleshooting
display, printer control panel 15
disposing of printer hard disk 234
distinctive ring service, fax
Index documents, printing
from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93
E
Eco
embedded solutions information
Embedded Web Server
checking the status of parts 241
checking the status of
creating a fax destination
creating e
modifying confidential print
scanning to a computer using 146
setting up e
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
emission notices 342, 346, 350, 351
encrypting the printer hard
envelopes
environmental settings
display brightness, adjusting 231
Eco
erasing non
erasing printer hard disk
Error reading USB drive. Remove
Error reading USB hub. Remove
Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 57 using Windows 57
Ethernet networking
Ethernet setup
exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web
exterior of the printer
e
e
‑mail alerts
low supply levels 253 paper jam 253 setting up 253
e
‑mail function
e
‑mail options
e
‑mail screen
E
e
‑mail shortcuts, creating using the Embedded Web
e
‑mail, sending
e
‑mailing
adding message line 116 adding subject line 116 changing output file type 116
359 configuring e
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the
setting up e
using the printer control
F
factory defaults
fax
sending 135, 136 sending at a scheduled time 136
fax and e
‑mail functions
fax and e
‑mail functions are not set
fax log
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
fax name, setting 133 fax number, setting 133
fax options
content source 140 content type 140
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 275
fax setup country
standard telephone line
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system administrator. 276
Index 360
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system administrator. 276
fax troubleshooting
can receive but not send
can send but not receive
cannot send or receive a fax 327
received fax has poor print
faxing
blocking junk faxes 139 canceling a fax job 139
configuring the printer to observe
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the
making a fax lighter or darker 138
sending a fax at a scheduled
sending using the printer control
panel 134 setting the date and time 134
setting the fax number 133 setting the outgoing fax name 133
file name
finding more information about the
flash drive
flash drives
font sample list
Forms and Favorites
FTP
FTP address creating shortcuts using the
FTP address, scanning to
using the printer control
FTP options
G
green settings
Eco
H
printing from a Macintosh
computer 97 printing from Windows 97
Hibernate mode
hiding icons on the home screen 21
home screen
customizing 21 hiding icons 21 showing icons 21
home screen applications
configuring 22 finding information 22
home screen buttons and icons
I
icons on the home screen
imaging unit
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
importing a configuration using the Embedded Web
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 276
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
individual settings information
using the Embedded Web
inserting a header or footer 108
installing an Internal Solutions
installing an optional card 34
installing options
installing printer hard disk 41
installing printer on a network
installing printer software
installing printer software
installing the 2100
installing the 250
installing the 550
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
Insufficient memory to collate job
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 278
Insufficient memory, some Held
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 278
internal print server
Internal Solutions Port
IP address of computer
Index 361
IP address, printer
J
jams
jams, clearing
in automatic document feeder top
L
labels, paper
letterhead
loading, 2100
loading, multipurpose
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [paper
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper
loading
letterhead in 2100
letterhead in multipurpose
multipurpose feeder 78 transparencies 78
loading letterhead
loading paper
2100
250
550
M
maintenance kit
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit nearly low
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain
making copies using paper from
memory
types installed on printer 234
Memory full, cannot print
Memory full, cannot send
menu settings page
menus
E
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 195
Miscellaneous Security
message e
Miscellaneous Security Settings
moving the printer 10, 251, 252
Multi Send
adding a profile 25 setting up 25
multipurpose feeder
Index 362
MyShortcut
N
Network [x] software error
network settings
network setup page
Networking Guide
No analog phone line connected to
Non
‑Lexmark [supply type], see
non
Not enough free space in flash
notices 341, 342, 343, 344, 345,
number of remaining pages
O
optional card
options
2100
250
550
Internal Solutions Port,
printer hard disk, installing 41
printer hard disk, removing 47
options, copy screen
options, touch
‑screen
e
ordering
ordering supplies
original size e
output file type
P
page setup e
paper
letterhead 88 preprinted forms 88 recycled 88
paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is
paper jams
paper jams, clearing
in automatic document feeder top
paper size
paper sizes
paper type
paper types
paper weights
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 282
parts
checking, from printer control
checking, using the Embedded
Personal Identification Number method
photos
placing separator sheets between
port settings
preparing to set up the printer on
print job
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 239
print quality troubleshooting
characters have jagged edges 304
compressed images appear on
prints 306 gray background on prints 306
horizontal voids appear on
printer is printing solid black
Index 363 repeating defects appear on
shadow images appear on
streaked horizontal lines appear
toner fog or background
shading 321 toner rubs off 321
toner specks appear on prints 322
transparency print quality is
poor 322 uneven print density 322
print troubleshooting
envelope seals when printing 297 error reading flash drive 297
incorrect characters print 298
incorrect margins on prints 308
jammed pages are not
job prints from wrong tray 298 job prints on wrong paper 298
multiple
‑language PDF files do not
print job takes longer than
tray linking does not work 302
unexpected page breaks
printer
basic model 11 fully configured 11
factory defaults, restoring 255
Printer had to restart. Last job may
printer hard disk
printer hard disk encryption 236
printer hard disk memory
printer information
printer IP address
printer is printing blank pages 310
printer messages
[x]
‑ page jam, open upper rear
[x]
‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[x]
‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–
[x]
‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 270
[x]
‑page jam, open tray [x].
[x]
‑page jam, open upper and
lower rear door. [231–234] 263
[x]
‑page jam, remove standard bin
[x]
‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load
Change [paper source] to [paper
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load
Close door or insert cartridge 273
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
Complex page, some data may not
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 274
Defective flash detected [51] 274
Disk full, scan job canceled 274
Disk must be formatted for use in
Disk near full. Securely clearing
Error reading USB drive. Remove
Error reading USB hub. Remove
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
Imaging unit nearly low
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 276
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
Insufficient memory to collate job
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 278
Insufficient memory, some Held
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
Index 364
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [custom type name [paper
Load [paper source] with [paper
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit nearly low
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain
Memory full, cannot print
Memory full, cannot send
Network [x] software error
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 281
Non
‑Lexmark [supply type], see
Not enough free space in flash
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 282
Printer had to restart. Last job
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
Remove defective disk [61] 283
Remove packaging material, [area
Remove paper from standard
Replace all originals if restarting
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
Replace cartridge, printer region
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
Replace jammed originals if
Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 284
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 285
Replace unsupported cartridge
Replace unsupported imaging unit
Scanner automatic feeder cover
Scanner disabled by admin
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
Scanner jam, remove all originals
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner
Scanner maintenance required
Serial option [x] error [54] 286
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 286
Some held jobs were not
Standard network software error
Standard USB port disabled
Supply needed to complete
Too many disks installed [58] 287
Too many flash options installed
Too many trays attached [58] 288
Tray [x] paper size
Unformatted flash detected
Unsupported camera mode, unplug camera and change
Unsupported option in slot [x]
Unsupported USB hub, please
USB port [x] disabled [56] 288
Weblink server not set up. Contact
printer options troubleshooting internal option is not
USB/parallel interface card 294
printer parts
printer problems, solving basic 289
printer security
printer software, installing
printing canceling, from the printer control
panel 98 directory list 98 font sample list 98
from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93
menu settings page 64 network setup page 64
printing a font sample list 98
printing a menu settings page 64 printing a network setup page 64
printing confidential and other held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 97 from Windows 97
Index 365
printing from a flash drive 94
publications
Push Button Configuration method
Q
R
recipient(s) e
recycled paper
recycling
Lexmark products 232 toner cartridges 232
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
Remote Operator Panel
Remove defective disk [61] 283
Remove packaging material, [area
Remove paper from standard
printing from a Macintosh
computer 97 printing from Windows 97
repeating defects appear on
Replace all originals if restarting
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
Replace cartridge, printer region
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
Replace jammed originals if
Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 284
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 285
Replace unsupported cartridge
Replace unsupported imaging unit
replacing the toner
reports
printing from a Macintosh
computer 97 printing from Windows 97
resolution e
resolution, fax
restoring factory default
RJ
S
Save As Shortcut
e
scan options
original size 149 page setup 149 resolution 149
Scan Preview
scan preview
scan screen
content source 149 content type 149
Scan to Computer
Scan to Network
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 333
partial document or photo
scan job was not successful 335
scanner unit does not
scanning takes too long or freezes
scanner
Automatic document feeder
Scanner automatic feeder cover
Scanner disabled by admin
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
scanner glass
Scanner jam, remove all originals
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner
Scanner maintenance required
scanning
to a computer using the
Index 366
using the Embedded Web
scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the
using a shortcut number 145 using the address book 145
using the printer control
scanning to network
security modifying confidential print
security settings information
security Web page
selecting a location for the
send as e
sending a fax using the printer
sending an e
‑mail using the printer
sending fax
sending fax at a scheduled
sending fax using the address
Serial option [x] error [54] 286
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 286
serial printing
setting
setting the fax number 133 setting the outgoing fax name 133
setting the Universal paper size 65
setting up e
setting up fax country
standard telephone line
setting up fax and e
setting up the printer on an Ethernet network
on an Ethernet network (Windows
shortcuts, creating
e
showing icons on the home
sides (duplex)
Sleep mode
Some held jobs were not
Standard network software error
Standard USB port disabled
status of parts
status of supplies
storing
streaked horizontal lines appear on
streaked vertical lines appear on
subject and message information adding to e
supplies
checking, from printer control
checking, using the Embedded
supplies, ordering
Supply needed to complete job 287
supply notifications
supported paper types 92 supported paper weights 92
T
telecommunication
the scanner does not respond 336
tips
toner cartridge
toner cartridges
toner darkness
Too many disks installed [58] 287
Too many flash options installed
Too many trays attached [58] 288
touch screen
Index 367 transparencies
tray
Tray [x] paper size
trays
troubleshooting an application error has
cannot open Embedded Web
checking an unresponsive
fax and e
‑mail functions are not
solving basic printer
the scanner does not respond 336
troubleshooting, copy
partial document or photo
poor scanned image quality 334
scanner unit does not
troubleshooting, display
troubleshooting, fax
can receive but not send
can send but not receive
cannot send or receive a fax 327
received fax has poor print
troubleshooting, paper feed message remains after jam is
troubleshooting, print
envelope seals when printing 297 error reading flash drive 297
incorrect characters print 298
incorrect margins on prints 308
jammed pages are not
job prints from wrong tray 298 job prints on wrong paper 298
multiple
‑language PDF files do not
print job takes longer than
tray linking does not work 302
unexpected page breaks
troubleshooting, print quality
characters have jagged edges 304
compressed images appear on
prints 306 gray background on prints 306
horizontal voids appear on
printer is printing solid black
repeating defects appear on
shadow images appear on
streaked horizontal lines appear
toner fog or background
shading 321 toner rubs off 321
toner specks appear on prints 322
transparency print quality is
poor 322 uneven print density 322
troubleshooting, printer options internal option is not
USB/parallel interface card 294
troubleshooting, printing
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 333
partial document or photo
scan job was not successful 335
scanner unit does not
scanning takes too long or freezes
U
understanding the home screen
Unformatted flash detected
Universal paper size
Unsupported camera mode, unplug
Unsupported option in slot [x]
Unsupported USB hub, please
updating options in printer
USB port [x] disabled [56] 288
USB/parallel interface card
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 145
using shortcuts
using the touch
V
printing from a Macintosh
computer 97 printing from Windows 97
Index
viewing
virtual display checking, using Embedded Web
voice mail
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
volatile memory 234 erasing 234
volatility
W
Weblink server not set up. Contact
wiping the printer hard disk 235
wireless network
wireless network setup using the Embedded Web
wireless setup wizard
X
368
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Business Laser Mono printing
- 1200 x 1200 DPI
- A4 60 ppm
- Mono copying Colour scanning Mono faxing
- Direct printing
- USB port Ethernet LAN
- Internal memory: 512 MB 800 MHz
- 43.3 kg